05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001...

272
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever. This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. This owner’s manual covers all models of the Acura CSX. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model. Owner’s Identification POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire de commander le numéro de pièce 33SNRC00 OWNER ADDRESS V. I. N. DELIVERY DATE DEALER NAME DEALER NO. ADDRESS OWNER’S SIGNATURE DEALER’S SIGNATURE STREET CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE (Date sold to original retail purchaser) STREET CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE

Transcript of 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001...

Page 1: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Acura CSX. You may find descriptionsof equipment and features that are not onyour particular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SNRC00

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600_001

Page 2: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Acura CSX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

Introduction

i

05/09/16 14:17:45 31SNR600_002

Page 3: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

05/09/16 14:17:56 31SNR600_003

Page 4: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

(heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 4

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 55

.........................................Features . 99

.......................................................................Before Driving . 153

.........................................................................................Driving . 165

.................................................Maintenance . 187

...............................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 225

......................................Technical Information . 247

...................................................Warranty and Customer Relations . 259

IND

EX

1

05/09/16 14:18:04 31SNR600_004

Page 5: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

2

05/09/16 14:18:06 31SNR600_005

Page 6: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Technical Information

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Maintenance

Warranty and CustomerRelations

Index

Service Information Summary

3

05/09/16 14:18:21 31SNR600_006

Page 7: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

GAUGES

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

MANUALTRANSMISSION

MIRROR CONTROLS

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS MOONROOF SWITCH

(P. 11, 26)

(P. 11, 26)

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG

DOOR LOCK TAB

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 106)

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

(P. 63)(P. 57) (P. 92)

(P. 100)

(P. 76)

(P. 98)

(P. 170)

(P. 168)

(P. 90)

(P. 82)

(P. 155)

(P. 91)

(P. 76)

(P. 94)

05/09/16 14:18:28 31SNR600_007

Page 8: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

** Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘A’’ logo.1 :2 :

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HORN

(P. 69) (P. 68)

(P. 70)

(P. 149)(P. 71)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS BUTTONS(P. 70)

DISPLAY CHANGEBUTTON(P. 63)

SEL/RESETBUTTON(P. 63)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P. 147)

VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P. 156)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P. 32)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P. 71)REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

HEATED MIRRORS(P. 95)

1

2

05/09/16 14:18:35 31SNR600_008

Page 9: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

6

05/09/16 14:18:37 31SNR600_009

Page 10: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 31..How the SRS Indicator Works . 31

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 32

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 32

.............................Airbag Service . 33...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 35

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 35

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 36

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 36

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 38

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 38

...Additional Safety Precautions . 39Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 40.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.........Protecting Small Children . 41.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 42....................Installing a Child Seat . 43

...............................With LATCH . 44..........................With a Seat Belt . 46

..............................With a Tether . 47...........Protecting Larger Children . 49

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 49..................Using a Booster Seat . 50

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 51

...Additional Safety Precautions . 52.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53

...................................Safety Labels . 54

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

05/09/16 14:18:41 31SNR600_010

Page 11: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

-You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat

(see pages ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

16

35 52

189

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

8

05/09/16 14:18:51 31SNR600_011

Page 12: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(2)

(2)

(8)

(8)

(7)

(9) (9)(3) (1) (4)

(6)

(10)(5)

(11)

(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags

05/09/16 14:18:57 31SNR600_012

Page 13: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

In addition, all Canadian provincesand most U.S. states require you towear seat belts.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

05/09/16 14:19:08 31SNR600_013

Page 14: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page formore information on how your sidecurtain airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).26

2931

CONTINUED

Airbags

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

05/09/16 14:19:16 31SNR600_014

Page 15: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

12

05/09/16 14:19:22 31SNR600_015

Page 16: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door-openindicator on the instrument panel toindicate when any door is not tightlyclosed.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Some models have auto doorlocking/unlocking features. Seepage for how to set them.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the door-open indicator works.

35 52

7660

77 CONTINUED

Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

05/09/16 14:19:32 31SNR600_016

Page 17: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Transport Canada and the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration recommend thatdrivers allow at least 25 cm (10inches) between the center of thesteering wheel and the chest. Inaddition to adjusting the seat, youcan adjust the steering wheel up anddown, and in and out (see page ).71

86

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults and Teens

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

05/09/16 14:19:40 31SNR600_017

Page 18: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the head restraint is adjusted toits highest position.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.86 87

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

05/09/16 14:19:48 31SNR600_018

Page 19: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

05/09/16 14:19:53 31SNR600_019

Page 20: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

22

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

05/09/16 14:20:01 31SNR600_020

Page 21: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Protecting Adults and Teens

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

05/09/16 14:20:07 31SNR600_021

Page 22: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other solid objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach solid objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

05/09/16 14:20:13 31SNR600_022

Page 23: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belts use the samemonitoring system as the frontairbags. The system may not workproperly under these conditions:

Placing heavy items on the frontpassenger’s seat.

The front passenger is not sittingproperly.

The front passenger’s seat-back ispressed forward by a folded-downrear seat.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts.If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a small child isriding there, the indicator will notcome on and the beeper will notsound.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer if the indicator comes on orthe beeper sounds when there is nofront passenger or objects on thefront seat.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

20

05/09/16 14:20:22 31SNR600_023

Page 24: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause a front, side, or sidecurtain airbag to inflate.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

16

46

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

05/09/16 14:20:31 31SNR600_024

Page 25: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.

214

do not deploy

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance

22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularly,and have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

05/09/16 14:20:39 31SNR600_025

Page 26: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

(9)(8) (1) (2)

(3) (11)

(5)

(4)

(13)(7) (10)

(14)(5)

(4)

(6)

(10)

(12)

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners(14) Rear Safing Sensor

05/09/16 14:20:45 31SNR600_026

Page 27: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Your airbag system includes:

26

29

31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)(16) Side Curtain Airbags

05/09/16 14:20:51 31SNR600_027

Page 28: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whethera child is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automaticallyturn the airbag off (see page

).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight of an infantor small child is detected, thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

32

28

28

32

32

21

31

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

25

05/09/16 14:20:58 31SNR600_028

Page 29: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).32

How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

26

05/09/16 14:21:07 31SNR600_029

Page 30: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

CONTINUED

Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

latched

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

05/09/16 14:21:15 31SNR600_030

Page 31: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Acura doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child, the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Advanced Airbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

28

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

05/09/16 14:21:23 31SNR600_031

Page 32: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat forciblyback on the folded rear seat.

The rear seat-back interfere withthe reclined front passenger’sseat-back when folding rear seat.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor. If it is not,the mat may interfere with theproper operation of the sensors andoperation of the seat.

32

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

05/09/16 14:21:33 31SNR600_032

Page 33: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans into the sideairbag’s path.

32Side Airbag Cutoff System

Additional Information About Your Airbags

30

05/09/16 14:21:41 31SNR600_033

Page 34: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

CONTINUED

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

31

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

05/09/16 14:21:50 31SNR600_034

Page 35: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect an infant or small child maybe in the front passenger’s seat. Itdoes mean there is a problemwith the airbag.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

This indicator alerts youthat the passenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

61

not

not

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

32

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

05/09/16 14:21:57 31SNR600_035

Page 36: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during the crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

If the indicator comes on with nopassenger in the front, or with anadult in the seat, there may be aproblem with the advanced airbagsystem. Have the vehicle checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in the backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.

Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

An airbag ever inflates. If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

33

05/09/16 14:22:05 31SNR600_036

Page 37: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

If water or another liquidsoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag cutoffsystem from working properly.

This will cause thefront passenger’s weight sensorsto work improperly. The systemmay shut off the front passenger’sairbag and the passenger airbagoff indicator will come on. Theseat belt reminder indicator for afront seat passenger may alsowork improperly.

Make sure that the folded-downrear seat does not press the frontpassenger’s seat-back. Check thepassenger airbag off indicator toconfirm that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag is operatingproperly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact yourAcura dealer.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not recline the front passenger’sseat-back as far to the rear aspossible with the right rear seatfolded down.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

34

05/09/16 14:22:12 31SNR600_037

Page 38: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every Canadianprovince and U.S. state requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

40 4849 52

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

35

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

05/09/16 14:22:20 31SNR600_038

Page 39: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children off all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. Transport Canada and theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration recommended thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

32

49

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children General Guidelines

36

05/09/16 14:22:29 31SNR600_039

Page 40: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

05/09/16 14:22:36 31SNR600_040

Page 41: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

49

17

16

86

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Protecting Children General Guidelines

38

05/09/16 14:22:44 31SNR600_041

Page 42: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).77

82

Additional Safety Precautions

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39

05/09/16 14:22:51 31SNR600_042

Page 43: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

Or, it can interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

40

05/09/16 14:23:00 31SNR600_043

Page 44: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

32

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

05/09/16 14:23:09 31SNR600_044

Page 45: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Look forCMVSS 213 or FMVSS 213 on thebox.

1.

44

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meetCanadian or U.S. Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213.

42

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

05/09/16 14:23:17 31SNR600_045

Page 46: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

3.1.

2.

3.

2. Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

05/09/16 14:23:26 31SNR600_046

Page 47: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat UsingLATCH

Installing a Child Seat

44

LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type

BUTTON

05/09/16 14:23:35 31SNR600_047

Page 48: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

6.

5.

4.

7.

87

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

45

TETHER STRAPHOOK

Flexible type

ANCHOR

05/09/16 14:23:42 31SNR600_048

Page 49: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Installing a Child Seat

46

05/09/16 14:23:49 31SNR600_049

Page 50: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

COVER

ANCHORAGE POINTS

ANCHOR

05/09/16 14:23:58 31SNR600_050

Page 51: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1. 2.

3.

46

Installing a Child Seat

48

ANCHORANCHOR

Outer Position

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

Center Position

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

05/09/16 14:24:05 31SNR600_051

Page 52: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

05/09/16 14:24:12 31SNR600_052

Page 53: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

Some Canadian provinces and U.S.states also require children to use abooster seat until they reach a givenage or weight [e.g., 6 years or 27 kg(60 lbs)]. Be sure to check currentlaws in the provinces or states where

you intend to drive.3.

4.

5.42

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

50

05/09/16 14:24:21 31SNR600_053

Page 54: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Transport Canada and NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration recommend that allchildren age 12 and under beproperly restrained in the back seat.

16 49

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

05/09/16 14:24:32 31SNR600_054

Page 55: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Protecting Larger Children

52

05/09/16 14:24:37 31SNR600_055

Page 56: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows,and set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

05/09/16 14:24:44 31SNR600_056

Page 57: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your dealer for areplacement.

Safety Labels

54

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

HOOD

05/09/16 14:24:59 31SNR600_057

Page 58: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 58.............................................Gauges . 63

.....................................Odometer . 63..............Display Change Button . 63

...................................Trip Meter . 64..................................Fuel Gauge . 64

...................Temperature Gauge . 64Outside Temperature

...................................Indicator . 65..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65

..................Maintenance Minder . 66Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 67.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 68

...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 69............Daytime Running Lights . 70

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 70.................Hazard Warning Button . 70.................Rear Window Defogger . 71

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 71...............................Keys and Locks . 73

........................Immobilizer System . 74................................Ignition Switch . 75

......................................Door Locks . 76......................Power Door Locks . 76

..............Childproof Door Locks . 77.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 77

.....................Auto Door Locking . 77.................Auto Door Unlocking . 79

................................................Trunk . 82........Emergency Trunk Opener . 82

.......................Remote Transmitter . 83.................................................Seats . 86

....................................Seat Heaters . 90..............................Power Windows . 91

.........................................Moonroof . 92.............................................Mirrors . 94

.................................Parking Brake . 95

.................................Interior Lights . 96...........Interior Convenience Items . 97

.......................Beverage Holders . 98...........Accessory Power Socket . 98

....................................Glove Box . 98...............Console Compartment . 98

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

55

05/09/16 14:25:03 31SNR600_058

Page 59: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

: If equipped

Control Locations

56

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

MIRROR CONTROLS

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

MANUALTRANSMISSION

MOONROOF SWITCH

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKET

DOOR LOCK TAB

GAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

AUDIO SYSTEM

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

(P. 57) (P. 92)

(P. 100)

(P. 76)

(P. 98)

(P. 170)

(P. 168)

(P. 90)

(P. 82)

(P. 155)

(P. 91)

(P. 76)

(P. 94)

(P. 63)(P. 106)

05/09/16 14:25:09 31SNR600_059

Page 60: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

57

LOW FUELINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

DOOR-OPENINDICATOR

TRUNK-OPENINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

DAYTIMERUNNINGLIGHTSINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

WASHER LEVELINDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWERSTEERING SYSTEM(EPS) INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P. 62)

(P. 59) (P. 60) (P. 60) (P. 59)(P. 58)

(P. 61)

(P. 59)

(P. 58)

(P. 60)

(P. 60)

(P. 59)

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 61)

(P. 62)

(P. 60)

(P. 61)

(P. 61)

(P. 61)

(P. 62)

(P. 62)

(P. 62)

05/09/16 14:25:16 31SNR600_060

Page 61: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This indicator reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you try to drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

1.

2.

20

239

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator

58

05/09/16 14:25:24 31SNR600_061

Page 62: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

31

32

179

74

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

05/09/16 14:25:32 31SNR600_062

Page 63: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This indicator comes on if the trunklid is not closed tightly.

This indicator comes on if any dooris not closed tightly.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin a circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

211 212

69

70

Instrument Panel Indicators

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Trunk-open Indicator

Door-open Indicator

Lights On Indicator‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

60

05/09/16 14:25:43 31SNR600_063

Page 64: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Thisindicator reminds you that it is timeto take your vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. When the indicatorcomes on, there is about 7.5 (1.9US gal) of fuel remaining in the tankbefore the reading reaches E. Thereis a small reserve of fuel remainingin the tank when the reading doesreach E.

149

203

149189

Instrument Panel Indicators

Cruise Main Indicator Low Fuel Indicator Maintenance MinderIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

05/09/16 14:25:54 31SNR600_064

Page 65: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.

If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will not turnoff immediately. If it does not go offafter driving a short distance, orcomes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be turned off,making the vehicle harder to steer.

Continuously driving under thoseconditions could damage the powersteering system.

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right repeatedly whilestopping or driving in extremely lowspeed, you may feel the steeringslightly harder due to the overheatof the steering gear box.

144

238

237

237

Instrument Panel Indicators

Security System Indicator Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

62

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

05/09/16 14:26:04 31SNR600_065

Page 66: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To switch the information displaybetween the odometer, trip meter,outside temperature (if equipped),and engine oil life and maintenanceitem code(s), press the SEL/RESETbutton repeatedly.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures in kilometers ormiles. It is illegal under Canadianprovincial regulations and U.S.federal law to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of kilometers ormiles indicated.

Press and hold until the speedometer,trip meter, and odometer readingsswitch between kilometers per hourand miles per hour. A beeper willsound.

Gauges

Odometer

Display Change Button

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

TRIP METER

SPEEDOMETER

FUELGAUGE

SEL/RESET BUTTON DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

INFORMATIONDISPLAY

TACHOMETER

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTONS

05/09/16 14:26:11 31SNR600_066

Page 67: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should be inthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, the reading mayreach near the red mark. If itreaches the red mark, pull safely tothe side of the road. Turn to page

for instructions and precautionson checking the engine coolingsystem.

There are two trip meters: TRIP Aand TRIP B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the SEL/RESET button repeatedly.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

This meter shows the number ofkilometers or miles driven since youlast reset it.

234

Trip Meter Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge

Gauges

64

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

05/09/16 14:26:19 31SNR600_067

Page 68: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

±

- - -

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears in the information displayafter you start the engine. Turn theengine off and confirm the fuel cap isinstalled. If it is, loosen the cap, thenretighten it until it clicks at leastonce. When you restart the engine,the message appears again. To clearthe message, press and hold theSEL/RESET button until it goesaway. The message will be displayed

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 3°C warmer or cooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the SEL/RESETbutton for 10 seconds. The followingsequence will appear for 1 secondeach: 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1.

When it reaches the desired value,release the SEL/RESET button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(0°C) could mean that ice is formingon the road surface.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Centigrade. To seethe outside temperature, press andrelease the SEL/RESET button untilthe temperature is shown in theinformation display.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 30 km/h.

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

take several days of normal driving for the vehicle to turn the warning off.

each time the engine is started. It will

CONTINUED

Gauges

Check Fuel Cap IndicatorOutside Temperature Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

05/09/16 14:26:28 31SNR600_068

Page 69: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel fill cap, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL goesout after 3 days of normal drivingonce the cap is tightened or replaced.If it does not go out, have yourdealer inspect the vehicle. For moreinformation, see page .238

189

Gauges

Maintenance Minder

66

05/09/16 14:26:32 31SNR600_069

Page 70: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

* To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘A’’ logo.:

Controls Near the Steering WheelInstrum

entsand

Controls

67

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

SEL/RESET BUTTON

HORNHOOD RELEASE HANDLE

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

(P. 32)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

HEATED MIRRORS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P. 70)(P. 69) (P. 68)

(P. 70)

(P. 71)

(P. 95)

(P. 149)(P. 71)

(P. 156)

(P. 147)

(P. 63)

(P. 63)

05/09/16 14:26:38 31SNR600_070

Page 71: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

---

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring.If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers will change to lowspeed operation when the vehiclespeed exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph).

The length of the wiper interval isvaried automatically according tothe vehicle’s speed.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

OFF

MIST

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

INT

68

05/09/16 14:26:46 31SNR600_071

Page 72: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turn signalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beams

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click. Thehigh beam indicator will come on(see page ). Pull it back to returnto low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

60

Turn Signal

Headlights

High Beams

Turn Signal and HeadlightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

05/09/16 14:26:53 31SNR600_072

Page 73: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

+ -

The buttons under the left side ventcontrol the brightness of theinstrument panel. Push the orbutton to adjust the brightness.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

With the headlight switch off orposition, the high beam

headlights come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button

70

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL BUTTONS

05/09/16 14:27:01 31SNR600_073

Page 74: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .95

CONTINUED

Rear Window Defogger Steering Wheel Adjustment

Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel AdjustmentInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

05/09/16 14:27:09 31SNR600_074

Page 75: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out to the desiredposition. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andthe indicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

1.

4.

2.

3.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

72

05/09/16 14:27:14 31SNR600_075

Page 76: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk and trunk releasehandle locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

Keys and LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALETKEY(Gray)

05/09/16 14:27:21 31SNR600_076

Page 77: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

Immobilizer System

74

05/09/16 14:27:28 31SNR600_077

Page 78: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.You can insert or

remove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

Ignition Switch

ON (II)

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

START (III)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

05/09/16 14:27:36 31SNR600_078

Page 79: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. Pull the tab outto lock the door, and push it in tounlock the door.

The lock tab on each door locks andunlocks that door. Pulling out on thedriver’s door lock tab locks all doors.To unlock the driver’s door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.If you turn it again, all the doorsunlock. All doors lock when you lockthe driver’s door from the outside

with the key.

To lock any door when getting out ofthe vehicle, pull the lock tab out, andclose the door.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the top of theswitch to lock all doors; push thebottom to unlock them.

To lock the doors when getting outof the vehicle, remove the key fromthe ignition switch, and push the topof the master door lock switch, thenclose the door.

With any door open and the key inthe ignition, both master door lockswitches are disabled. They are notdisabled when all the doors areclosed, or when the key is not in theignition.

Door Locks

Power Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

76

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TAB

To lock

To unlock

To lock

To unlock

05/09/16 14:27:44 31SNR600_079

Page 80: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, push the locktab in, and use the outside doorhandle.

For manual transmission, go tostep 5.

Set the parking brake.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark (P) (automatic transmission),and close the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Your vehicle has two custom doorlock settings: auto door locking andauto door unlocking. Make allsettings before you start driving.

The auto door locking feature hastwo (manual transmission) or three(automatic transmission) possiblesettings:

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 15 km/h (9 mph).

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.This is the default setting.

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark position.

1.

2.

3.

On models with automatictransmission

Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speedreaches about 15 km/h (9 mph).

Door Locks

Childproof Door Locks Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking

To activate an auto door lock mode:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

LEVER

A/T models

Unlock

Lock

05/09/16 14:27:57 31SNR600_080

Page 81: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Automatic transmission:Push and hold the brake pedal,then move the shift lever out ofPark (P).

Push and hold the lock side of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

Release the switch, move the shiftlever to Park (P) (automatictransmission), and turn theignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position within 5seconds.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark (P) (automatic transmission),and open the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Set the parking brake.

Push and hold the lock side of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound after about 5seconds.

Release the switch, and turn theignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position within 5seconds.

5.

4.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Door Locks

To turn the auto door lock modesoff:

78

05/09/16 14:28:07 31SNR600_081

Page 82: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Push and hold the lock side of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

Release the switch, and turn theignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position within 5seconds.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark (P), and close the driver’sdoor.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

The auto door unlocking feature hastwo (manual transmission) or three(automatic transmission) possiblesettings:

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.This is the default setting.

The driver’s door unlocks whenyou move the shift lever to thePark position.

3.

4.

1.

2.

On models with automatic transmissionLocks all doors when the shift lever ismoved out of Park (P).

On models with automatictransmission

CONTINUED

Door Locks

Auto Door UnlockingTo activate an auto door lock mode:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

05/09/16 14:28:18 31SNR600_082

Page 83: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Unlocks driver’s door when the ignitionswitch is moved out of the ON (II)position.

Automatic transmission:

Make sure the shift lever is inPark (P) (automatic transmission),and close the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

For manual transmission, go tostep 5.

Push and hold the brake pedal,then move the shift lever out ofPark (P).

Push and hold the unlock side ofthe master door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

Release the switch, move the shiftlever to Park (P) (automatictransmission), and turn theignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position within 5seconds.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark (P) (automatic transmission),and open the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Set the parking brake.Set the parking brake.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

Door Locks

To activate an auto door unlockmode:

To turn the auto door unlock modesoff:

80

A/T models

05/09/16 14:28:30 31SNR600_083

Page 84: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

On models with automatic transmissionUnlocks driver’s door when the shiftlever is moved to Park (P).

Push and hold the unlock side ofthe master door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

Release the switch, and turn theignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position within 5seconds.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark (P), and close the driver’sdoor.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Push and hold the unlock side ofthe master door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

Release the switch, and turn theignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position within 5seconds.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Door Locks

To activate an auto door unlockmode:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

05/09/16 14:28:39 31SNR600_084

Page 85: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from inside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

To open the trunk, pull the trunkrelease handle on the left side of thedriver’s seat. To protect items in thetrunk when you need to give the keyto someone else, lock the trunkrelease handle with the master key,and give the other person the valetkey.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging it,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .

39

53

Emergency Trunk Opener

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Trunk

82

MASTER KEY

PULL

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

RELEASE LEVER

05/09/16 14:28:47 31SNR600_085

Page 86: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

Press this button once tolock all doors. When you push LOCKtwice within 5 seconds, someexterior lights will flash once and ahorn will sound to verify that thedoors are locked and the securitysystem has set. You cannot lock thedoors if any door is not fully closedor the key is in the ignition switch.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button. Thisbutton does not work when the keyis in the ignition switch.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the door activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open any door, the light stays onfor about 30 seconds, then fades out.If you relock the doors with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the light goesoff immediately.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system will also set.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or insert the key.

Press thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

Remote Transmitter

LOCK

UNLOCK

PANIC

TRUNK RELEASE

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

05/09/16 14:28:54 31SNR600_086

Page 87: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

Replacing the Transmitter BatteryRemote Transmitter Care

Remote Transmitter

84

SCREW

05/09/16 14:29:02 31SNR600_087

Page 88: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Install the parts in reverse order.

3.

4.

5.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

85

TAB

BATTERY

05/09/16 14:29:09 31SNR600_088

Page 89: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

-See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

Seats

Front Seat Adjustments

86

05/09/16 14:29:16 31SNR600_089

Page 90: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

CONTINUED

Seats

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Head Restraints

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

RELEASE BUTTON

05/09/16 14:29:24 31SNR600_090

Page 91: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back is released from insidethe trunk.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the head restraint is adjusted toits highest position.

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest by movingit forward and backward. Make surethe armrest is securely latched.Make sure your passenger’s handsor fingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

The left and right seat-backs can befolded separately from inside thetrunk.

Seats

Folding Rear SeatArmrest

88

Rear Center Position

RELEASE BUTTON

05/09/16 14:29:32 31SNR600_091

Page 92: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back, pull therelease under the trunk panel. Pushthe seat-back down, then let go ofthe release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not interfere with the frontpassenger’s seat-back. This willcause the front passenger’s weightsensors to work improperly (seepage ). Also check the passengerairbag off indicator to assure properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure there are no twists in thecenter shoulder belt.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

28

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

GUIDE

CENTER SHOULDER BELT

RELEASEPull

05/09/16 14:29:39 31SNR600_092

Page 93: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Pushthe top of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the bottom ofthe switch. This will keep the seat

warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat temperature drops.

In LO, the heater does not cycle withtemperature change.

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

53

161

On Premium model

Seats, Seat Heaters

Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seat Heaters

90

05/09/16 14:29:47 31SNR600_093

Page 94: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically godown or up all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

CONTINUED

Power Windows

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

05/09/16 14:29:54 31SNR600_094

Page 95: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If equippedTurn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating themoonroof switch on the ceilingconsole.

To open the moonroof fully, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from openingfully, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

To tilt the moonroof, push the centerof the moonroof switch straight up.To stop the moonroof from tiltingfully open, push the moonroof switchforward.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull or push the moonroofswitch lightly to the first detent, andhold it. The moonroof will stop whenyou release the switch.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Toreset the AUTO function afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse, do this:

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

Power Windows, Moonroof

Moonroof

92

MOONROOF SWITCH

TiltClose

Open

05/09/16 14:30:03 31SNR600_095

Page 96: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe moonroof switch forward to thesecond detent, then release it. Themoonroof closes all the way. To stopthe moonroof from closing all theway, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

Moonroof

Auto Reverse

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

05/09/16 14:30:09 31SNR600_096

Page 97: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

2.

3.

4.

1.

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

94

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

TAB

05/09/16 14:30:17 31SNR600_097

Page 98: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

58

Mirrors, Parking Brake

Parking BrakeHeated Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

PARKING BRAKE LEVERHEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

05/09/16 14:30:24 31SNR600_098

Page 99: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch; ON (right), Door Activated,and OFF (left). In the DoorActivated (center) position, the lightcomes on when you:

Open any door.Remove the key from the ignition.Unlock the doors with the key orthe remote transmitter.

The front ceiling light has a two-position switch; Door Activated andOFF.

The front ceiling light has twospotlights. Push the spotlight lensesto turn them on and off.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight(s) dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

If you do not open either door afteryou unlock the driver’s door orremove the key from the ignitionswitch, the light(s) fades out inabout 30 seconds.

If you leave either door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light(s) will go off after 3minutes.

On models with moonroof

On models with moonroof

Ceiling Light

Spotlights

Interior Lights

96

DOOR ACTIVATED

OFFOFF

ON

SWITCHES

DOORACTIVATED

05/09/16 14:30:34 31SNR600_099

Page 100: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Push on the spotlight lenses to turnthe light on and off.

On models without moonroof

Interior Lights, Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

97

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

COIN BOX

CENTER POCKET

COAT HOOK

GLOVE BOX

VANITY MIRROR

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

BEVERAGEHOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

05/09/16 14:30:39 31SNR600_100

Page 101: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). It will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

There is another accessory powersocket in the center consolecompartment. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less (10amps).

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.

To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

Beverage Holders Console Compartment

Accessory Power Socket

Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items

98

LEVER

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

05/09/16 14:30:50 31SNR600_101

Page 102: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 100...........................Using the A/C . 102

................................Audio System . 106..........................Playing the Radio . 108

................................Playing a Disc . 112.......Disc Player Error Messages . 117

...................................CD Changer . 118.....CD Changer Error Messages . 122

..........................Setting the Clock . 123Playing the Radio (Vehicles with

..................Navigation System) . 125Playing a Disc (Vehicles with

..................Navigation System) . 129Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with

..................Navigation System) . 132Disc Player Error Messages

(Vehicles with Navigation..................................System) . 142

............................Radio Reception . 143..................Protecting Your Discs . 145.................Radio Theft Protection . 146................Remote Audio Controls . 147

............................Security System . 148...............................Cruise Control . 149

FeaturesF

eatures

99

05/09/16 14:30:55 31SNR600_102

Page 103: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.The fan speed is represented byvertical bars in the display.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on. You will see A/C ONor A/C Off in the display. When youturn the A/C off, the system cannotregulate the inside temperature ifyou set the dial below the outsidetemperature.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

100

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AUTO BUTTON FAN CONTROLDIAL

OFF BUTTON

RECERCULATIONBUTTON

A/C BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

FRESHAIRBUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTERBUTTON

MODE BUTTON

05/09/16 14:31:02 31SNR600_103

Page 104: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When this button is pressed, theindicator in the button comes on andthe air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again(recirculation mode).

When this button is pressed, theindicator in the button comes on, andair is brought in from the outside ofthe vehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on. Pushing thisbutton also turns the mirror heaterson or off (see page ).

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

95

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Recirculation Button

Fresh Air Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control Button

Features

101

05/09/16 14:31:16 31SNR600_104

Page 105: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

Turn the fan on.If the A/C is off, turn it on.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 0°C.

1.

2.3.4.

1.2.3.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.3.4.

64

If the interior is very warm,

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Ventilation

Using the Heater

Using the A/C Dehumidify the Interior

102

05/09/16 14:31:28 31SNR600_105

Page 106: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C (if equipped).The A/C indicator will not comeon, if it was previously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton until the indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

Select . When you select, the system automatically

switches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C (if equipped).The A/C indicator will not comeon, if it was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

5.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Defog and Defrost

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

103

05/09/16 14:31:37 31SNR600_106

Page 107: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the Auto button.Set the desired temperature byturning the Temperature Controldial. You will see AUTO in thesystem’s display.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

When you turn the fan control dial,the fan is taken out of AUTO mode,and the fan starts to run at theselected speed.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.1.

2.

Climate Control

To Cool or Heat Automatically

Semi-automatic Operation

To Turn Everything Off

104

05/09/16 14:31:44 31SNR600_107

Page 108: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Climate Control

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Features

105

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

05/09/16 14:31:48 31SNR600_108

Page 109: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Audio System

106

Touring model without navigation system Premium model without navigation system

05/09/16 14:31:52 31SNR600_109

Page 110: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Audio SystemF

eatures

107

Models with navigation system

05/09/16 14:31:54 31SNR600_110

Page 111: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button). On theFM band, ST will be displayed if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, thepreset bars, and AUTO SELECT.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each side of the bars(1 6) can store one station on AM,and two stations on FM.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK bar, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a

total of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwelve stations.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Play the Radio

To Select a Station

PRESET

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Playing the Radio

108

05/09/16 14:32:04 31SNR600_111

Page 112: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

- You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset bar if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset bar.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsas previously described.

, press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the bass (BAS),treble (TRE), fader (FAD), balance(BAL), and speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the SOUND(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ inthe display. The system willautomatically return the display tothe selected audio mode about 5seconds after you stop adjusting amode.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset bars.

To turn off auto select

CONTINUED

Adjusting the SoundAUTO SELECT

Playing the RadioF

eatures

109

05/09/16 14:32:12 31SNR600_112

Page 113: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BALANCE adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while FADER adjusts thefront-to-back strength.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

The SVCmode controls the volume based onvehicle speed. The faster you go, thelouder the audio volume becomes.As you slow down, the audio volumedecreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.Turn the SOUND (TUNE) knob toadjust the setting to your liking.If you feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Use the TREBLE/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking.

70Balance/Fader

Audio System LightingSpeed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC)

Treble/Bass

Playing the Radio

110

05/09/16 14:32:17 31SNR600_113

Page 114: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Playing a Disc

Features

111

SCANBUTTON

FOLDER KNOB

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

LOADINDICATOR

EJECTBUTTON

CDBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

Premium modelTouring model

LOADINDICATOR

CDBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

DISP BUTTON

FOLDER KNOB(TUNE KNOB)

DISPBUTTON

06/04/27 18:11:48 31SNR600 0114 

Page 115: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the CD player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1), 24, 22.05, 16 kHz(MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps(MPEG2)Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers (including ROOT):8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Insert a disc into the slot. The drivewill pull the disc in the rest of theway to play it. When the systemreaches the end of the disc, it willreturn to the beginning and play thedisc again.

The CD player can also play CD-Rsand CD-RWs in MP3 and WMAcompressed formats. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, you will see‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ in the display. Youcan select up to 255 folders or tracks.

Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button(AM or FM button). Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring.

On Touring model

To Play a Disc

Playing a Disc

112

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

05/09/16 14:32:33 31SNR600_115

Page 116: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3/WMA mode, use theFOLDER (TUNE) knob to selectfolders in the disc, and use theSEEK/SKIP bar to change files.

Each time you press the DISP buttonwhile playing a CD-TEXT, thedisplay mode changes from albumname, to artist name, to track name,and then to normal display. Whenplaying a disc in MP3/WMA, thedisplay mode changes from foldername, to file name, to artist tag, toalbum tag, to track tag, and then tonormal display.

If the title is too long, it will not showall at once. Press and hold the DISPbutton, and the rest of the title willshow in the display.

You will also see the album and trackname (CD-TEXT), or the folder andfile name (MP3/WMA) under theseconditions:

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

Each time a new track, file, orfolder plays, other than in normaldisplay mode.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/FilesName Display Function

Playing a DiscF

eatures

113

05/09/16 14:32:40 31SNR600_116

Page 117: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

-In MP3/WMA mode

Toselect a different folder, turn theFOLDER (TUNE) knob clockwise tomove to the beginning of the nextfolder. Turn the knobcounterclockwise to move to thebeginning of the current folder. Turnit counterclockwise again to skip tothe beginning of the previous folder.

Each time youpress and release the side, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (files inMP3/WMA mode). Press andrelease the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3/WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button toturn it off.

FOLDER SELECTIONSEEK/SKIP REPEAT (TRACK/FILE

REPEAT)

Playing a Disc

114

05/09/16 14:32:45 31SNR600_117

Page 118: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

- - -In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat mode, pressthe RPT button repeatedly until yousee F-RPT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

This feature plays the trackwithin a disc in random order. InMP3/WMA mode, this feature onlyplays folders within a disc in randomorder. Files in the folder are playedin recorded order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. In MP3/WMA mode,press the RDM button twice to selectwithin a disc random play. You willsee RDM in the display. Press andrelease the RDM button again toreturn to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles in the current folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed in MP3/WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressthe RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to within adisc random play, then to normalplaying.

CONTINUED

FOLDER-REPEATRANDOM (Random within aDisc) FOLDER-RANDOM

Playing a DiscF

eatures

115

05/09/16 14:32:51 31SNR600_118

Page 119: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

In MP3/WMA modePress the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

Press the AM/FM button (AM orFM button) to switch to the radiowhile a CD is playing. Press the CDbutton to play the CD.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks/files on thedisc in the order they are recordedon the disc. To activate the scanfeature, press the SCAN button. Youwill see SCAN in the display. You willget a 10 second sampling of eachtrack on the disc. You will also see atrack/file name in the display. Pressand hold the SCAN button to get outof the system and play the last tracksampled.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ofeach folder for 10 seconds. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press the SCAN button until you seeF-SCAN in the display. The foldername is also displayed. To hear therest of the folder, press the SCANbutton, within 10 seconds. If you donot, the system advances to the nextfolder, plays 10 seconds of it, andcontinues throughout the rest of thefolder the same way. When thesystem samples the first file of allfolders, F-SCAN is canceled, and thedisc plays normally.

145

To Stop Playing a DiscSCAN

Protecting Discs

F-SCAN

Playing a Disc

116

05/09/16 14:32:58 31SNR600_119

Page 120: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

IndicationIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

SolutionCause

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature

Disc Player Error MessagesF

eatures

117

05/09/16 14:33:04 31SNR600_120

Page 121: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your audio system has an in-dashCD changer that holds up to six CDs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

On the upper right side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinking,and the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

Insert a CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

When LOAD appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot. Do not try to insert adisc until LOAD appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

On Premium model without navigationsystem

CD Changer

Operating the CD Changer Loading CDs in the Changer

118

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

05/09/16 14:33:15 31SNR600_121

Page 122: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected CD in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that CD ends, the next CD inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last CD finishes, thesystem returns to the first CD.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button.

Each time you press the sideof the SKIP bar, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the

side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track. To move rapidlywithin a track, press and hold the

or side of the skipbar.

When you press and hold the SCANbutton until you see D-SCAN in thedisplay, the first track of the currentCD plays for about 10 seconds. Tohear the rest of the CD, press theSCAN button again within 10seconds. If you don’t, the system

advances to the next disc, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthroughout the rest of the CDs thesame way. When the system reachesthe last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,and the CD plays normally.

When you press the SCAN button,the first track of the current discplays for about 10 seconds. You willsee SCAN in the screen and in thedisplay. To hear the rest of the track,press the SCAN button again within10 seconds. If you don’t, the systemadvances to the next track, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthrough the rest of the tracks thesame way. When the system reachesthe last track, TRACK SCAN iscanceled, and the CD plays normally.

This feature, when activated,samples the first file in each folderon the disc in order from the mainfolders. To activate the folder scanfeature, press and release the SCANbutton repeatedly. You will seeF-SCAN in the display. The systemwill then play the first file in the mainfolders for about 10 seconds. If youdo nothing, the system will then playthe following first files for 10seconds each. When it plays a filethat you want to continue listening to,press and hold the SCAN button.

CD Changer

To Play a CD

To Change Tracks

Track Scan

Disc Scan

Folder Scan Features

119

06/04/27 18:11:59 31SNR600 0122 

Page 123: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This feature replays the currenttrack continuously.

To activate folder repeat, press andhold the TUNE knob for about 2seconds, then turn the same knob toselect folder repeat.

To activate track/file repeat, pressand hold the TUNE knob for about 2seconds, then turn the same knob toselect repeat mode from the display.

Press and release the TUNE knob toenter the setting.

This feature replays all files on theselected folder in the order they arecompressed.

Press and release the TUNE knob toenter the setting.

Press and release the TUNE knob toenter the setting.

This feature continuously replays thecurrent disc.

To activate disc repeat, press andhold the TUNE knob for about 2seconds, then turn the same knob toselect disc repeat mode.

This feature plays the tracks of thecurrent disc in random order.To activate random within a disc,press and hold the TUNE knob forabout 2 seconds, then turn the sameknob to select random within a disc.Press and release the TUNE knob toenter the setting.

This feature plays all files within afolder in random order.To activate folder random, press andhold the TUNE knob for about 2seconds, then turn the same knob toselect folder random.Press and release the TUNE knob toenter the setting.

To turn off each repeat or randomfeature, press and hold the TUNEknob for about 2 seconds, then selectthe normal play by turning the sameknob.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button. Each timeyou press the AM/FM button, thesystem changes to the next mode.When you return to CD mode bypressing the CD button, play willcontinue where it left off.

Press and release the TUNE knob toenter the setting.

CD Changer

Track Repeat

Folder Repeat

Disc Repeat

Random Play within a Disc

Folder Random

To Stop Playing a Disc

120

06/04/27 18:12:18 31SNR600 0123 

Page 124: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is on or off:

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the LOADindicator begins to blink.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notload another CD, within 10 seconds,the system selects the previousmode (AM, FM1 or FM2).

If you do not remove the CD fromthe slot, the system will reload theCD after 10 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the CD, press the CD button.

To remove the disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe appropriate preset button. Whenthat disc begins playing, press theeject button.

CD Changer

Removing CDs from the In-dashCD Changer

Features

121

06/04/27 18:12:26 31SNR600 0124 

Page 125: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

ErrorMassage

Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

TOC Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature

Press the disc eject button, and the remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Press the disc eject button, and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Changer Error Messages

122

05/09/16 14:33:43 31SNR600_125

Page 126: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

Setting the ClockF

eatures

123

CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTON

M BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTON

M BUTTON

Premium modelTouring model

05/09/16 14:33:48 31SNR600_126

Page 127: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theCLOCK button until you hear a beep,then pressing the R (preset 3) buttonsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, the clock sets forwardto the beginning of the next hour.

To set the time, press the CLOCK(AM/FM or AM) button until youhear a beep, then release the button.The displayed time begins to blink.

Change the hour by pressing the H(preset 1) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minute by pressing the M(preset 2) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

Setting the Clock

124

05/09/16 14:33:53 31SNR600_127

Page 128: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Playing the Radio (Vehicles with Navigation System)F

eatures

125

AM/FM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTONBACKGROUND ICON

SOUND ICON

AM ICON

TUNE BAR

FM1 ICON FM2 ICON

PRESET BUTTONS

AUTO SELECTICON

JOYSTICK

05/09/16 14:33:57 31SNR600_128

Page 129: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See the Navisection in your Quick Start Guide foran overview of this system, and thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

Push the AUDIO button to show theaudio system screen. You can alsooperate the audio system withoutshowing the audio system screen byusing the standard controls. Thestatus bar is shown at the bottom ofthe screen each time you press abutton.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, or AM). On the FMband, STEREO will be displayed ifthe station is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction on AM is notavailable.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the bar to tune to a higherfrequency, and the bar to tune toa lower frequency. When you pressand hold the or bar, the systembeeps twice, and the frequency goesup or down until you release the bar.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold or on the TUNEbar until you hear a beep, thenrelease the bar.

Playing the Radio (Vehicles with Navigation System)

Voice Control System

SCAN

To Play the Radio

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

126

05/09/16 14:34:06 31SNR600_129

Page 130: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

- -

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the AUTO SEL icon. ‘‘AUTOSEL’’ flashes in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN functions to find stations, thenstore them in the preset buttons asdescribed.

press theAUTO SEL icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

There are three modes of display:level (the audio level appears as tenvertical bar graphs), spectrumanalysis (the audio level appears asripples of water), and off (a plainbackground is displayed). Each timeyou touch the Background icon, themode changes.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off Auto Select,

CONTINUED

Preset AUTO SELECT

To Change the Background Image

Playing the Radio (Vehicles with Navigation System)F

eatures

127

05/09/16 14:34:15 31SNR600_130

Page 131: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

-+ -

To adjust the sound, push theAUDIO button, then enter the soundgrid by touching the SOUND icon onthe display.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on each sideof the treble or bass adjustment bar,or move the joystick. The adjustmentbar shows you the current setting.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjusts the front-to-back strength.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon, or movethe joystick. To adjust the front/rearfader, touch the ‘‘FR’’ or ‘‘RR’’ icon,or move the joystick.

The SVCmode controls the volume based onvehicle speed. The faster you go, thelouder the audio volume becomes.As you slow down, the audio volumedecreases.

The default setting is Mid. If you feelthe sound is too loud, choose low. Ifyou feel the sound is too quiet,choose Hi.

To see the audio display when youare finished adjusting the sound,wait 5 seconds.

70

Adjusting the Sound

Playing the Radio (Vehicles with Navigation System)

Audio System Lighting

Treble/Bass

Left/Right Balance and Front/Rear Fader

Speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC)

128

SOUND ICON

05/09/16 14:34:23 31SNR600_131

Page 132: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Playing a Disc (Vehicles with Navigation System)F

eatures

129

CD ICON

OPEN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONRANDOMBUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

05/09/16 14:34:28 31SNR600_132

Page 133: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,press the OPEN button, and insert adisc about halfway into the disc slot.The drive will pull the disc in the restof the way, and the disc will begin toplay. You operate the disc playerwith the same controls used for theradio. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

Push the button to play the nexttrack on the disc. Push the

button once to replay the trackin play; press it twice to replay theprevious track. To move rapidlywithin a track, press and hold the

or the button.Push the AUDIO button to show theaudio system screen. You can alsooperate the audio system withoutshowing the audio system screen byusing the standard controls. Thestatus bar is shown at the bottom ofthe screen each time you press abutton.

When you play CD-TEXT, you willsee the track name, artist name, andalbum name on the screen. Whenyou play MP3/WMA discs, you willsee the track name and folder nameon the screen. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

The player can also play CD-TEXT,MP3, and WMA formats.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously replay a track. Youwill see REPEAT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff. In MP3/WMA mode, press andhold the RPT button to activatefolder repeat. Folder repeatcontinuously replays the folder.

Playing a Disc (Vehicles with Navigation System)

Disc Player To Change Tracks

REPEAT

130

CLOSE BUTTON

DISC SLOT Avoid using discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

05/09/16 14:34:36 31SNR600_133

Page 134: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. Touch TRACKLIST on the screen, and the track listscreen is shown.

If you are playing a CD, the screenshows the track number. If you areplaying a CD-TEXT disc, the trackname is also shown. If you areplaying an MP3 or WMA disc, thefolders will also be shown.

If there are no track names, thetrack numbers are displayed. Youwill see the current track highlighted.Select the desired track. If you arechecking the track list and want togo back to previous screen, touchReturn.

Press the RDMbutton to play the tracks in randomorder. You will see RANDOM in thedisplay. Press the RDM button againto return to normal play. In MP3/WMA mode, press and hold theRDM button to activate folderrandom. Folder random plays thetracks in random order within thecurrent folder.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded. Toactivate it, press and release theSCAN button. You will see SCAN inthe display, and you will get a 10second sampling of each track on thedisc. Press the SCAN button again toget out of scan mode. In MP3/WMAmode, press and hold the SCANbutton to activate folder scan. Folderscan samples the first track of eachfolder.

To Choose a TrackRANDOM

SCAN

Playing a Disc (Vehicles with Navigation System)F

eatures

131

05/09/16 14:34:43 31SNR600_134

Page 135: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Press the OPEN button. The screenfolds back, and the disc playerappears. Press the eject button( ) to remove the disc. If youeject the disc, but do not remove itfrom the slot, the system willautomatically reload it after 10seconds and will remain there in apause mode.

To close the screen, press theCLOSE button. The screen will notclose if you have a partially insertedCD or PC card.

The disc player plays MP3/WMAfolders in recorded order. Maximumplayable folder layers are 8, totalplayable folders are 99, and totalplayable tracks are 999 per disc. Ifyour disc has a complex structure,the disc player takes some time toread the disc before playing it.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button or CD/AUX button. You can also touch theFM1, FM2, AM, or CARD icon onthe screen. To return to disc mode,press the CD/AUX button or touchthe CD icon.

145

To Stop Playing a Disc Removing a Disc

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

Protecting Discs

Playing a Disc (Vehicles with Navigation System)

132

EJECT BUTTON

CLOSE BUTTON

05/09/16 14:34:51 31SNR600_135

Page 136: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,press the OPEN button, insert a PCcard all the way into the card slot,then press the CLOSE button. ThePC card will begin to play. Youoperate the PC card with the samecontrols used for the radio. Thenumber of the track playing is shownin the display. The system willcontinuously play a card until youchange modes.

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

PC Card

Features

133

PLAY MODE ICONTRACK LIST ICON

PC CARD ICON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

PC CARD SLOT

CLOSE BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

OPENBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

Models with navigation system

CD/AUXBUTTON

05/09/16 14:34:58 31SNR600_136

Page 137: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.

You cannot close the display untilthe PC card is inserted all the wayin or removed.

The system may not be able toread some memory cardsdepending on the type of memorycard or combination of PC cardadaptor and memory card.Recommended memory cards areCompactFlash and Flash ATAmemory cards.

Push the AUDIO button to show theaudio system screen. You can alsooperate the audio system withoutshowing the audio system screen byusing the standard controls. Thestatus bar is shown at the bottom ofthe screen each time you press abutton.

The PC card player can play MP3and WMA formats.

When you insert a PC card intothe slot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

134

NOTE:

05/09/16 14:35:05 31SNR600_137

Page 138: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

Play Mode

Features

135

FOLDER MODE

ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE

MODE INDICATOR

MODE INDICATOR

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON

05/09/16 14:35:12 31SNR600_138

Page 139: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

There are three modes to choosefrom: folder, artist, and album.Touch the PLAY MODE icon, thenchoose one.

Choose ‘‘Continue playing thecurrent song’’ or ‘‘Play a new tracklist.’’ Continue playing the CurrentSong plays the current song, thengoes into the play mode you chose.Play a new track list plays the playmode you chose.

Push the button to play the nexttrack. Push the button once toreplay the track in play; press it twiceto replay the previous track. Tomove rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or the button.

Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they are recorded in. Artistmode plays tracks in alphabeticalorder by artist and song title. Albummode plays albums in alphabeticalorder. If the ID3 tag information isnot in your card, the play modemight not work properly.

You can always go back to theprevious screen by pressing theCANCEL button. Press the AUDIObutton to exit.

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

To select a play mode To Change Tracks

136

05/09/16 14:35:19 31SNR600_139

Page 140: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Press the RPT buttonto continuously replay a track. Youwill see TRACK REPEAT in thedisplay. Press RPT button again toturn it off.

Press and hold the RPT button untilyou hear a beep. Folder, artist, oralbum repeat will be activateddepending on which play mode youchose. Folder repeat continuouslyreplays the folder. Artist repeatcontinuously replays by that artist.Album repeat continuously replaysthe album. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

Press the RDMbutton to play the tracks in randomorder. You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display. Press theRDM button again to return tonormal play.

Press and hold the RDM button untilyou hear a beep. Folder, artist, oralbum random will be activateddepending on which play mode youchose. Folder random plays thetracks in random order within afolder. Artist random plays the artist’stracks in random order. Albumrandom plays the tracks in randomorder within an album. Press theRDM button again to turn it off.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the PC cardin the order they are recorded. Toactivate it, press and release theSCAN button. You will see TRACKSCAN in the display, and you will geta 10 second sampling of each trackon the card. Press the SCAN buttonagain to get out of scan mode.

Press and hold the SCAN buttonuntil you hear a beep. Folder, artist,or album scan will be activateddepending on which play mode youchose. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track. Folder scansamples the first track of each folder.Artist scan samples the first track ofeach artist. Album scan samples thefirst track of each album. To hearthe rest of the folder, the artist, orthe album, press the SCAN button,within 10 seconds. If you do not, thesystem advances to the next folder,artist, or album, plays for 10 secondsof it, and continues throughout therest of folders, artists, or albums thesame way. When the system reachesthe last folder, artist, or album, thescan mode is cancelled, and the PCcard plays normally.

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

REPEAT

RANDOM

SCAN

Features

137

05/09/16 14:35:25 31SNR600_140

Page 141: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

To Choose a Track

138

SONG SEARCH ICON

TRACK LIST ICON

(Folder Mode)

(Artist Mode)

(Album Mode)

SONG SEARCH ICON

SONG SEARCH ICON

05/09/16 14:35:35 31SNR600_141

Page 142: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. Touch TRACKLIST on the screen, and the track listscreen will be shown. The displaychanges depending on which playmode you chose. You will see thecurrent track highlighted. Select thedesired track. If you want to go backto the previous screen, press Return.

If you want to search for a particularsong, select Song Search on thetrack list screen. You can search asong from Title by Keyword, Artist,or Album.

If you choose Title by Keyword,enter the title or any keyword, thenpress List. The system will search tofind the song or songs.

If you cannot find characters, selectMore to show other characters.

CONTINUED

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

Search by Title by Keyword

Features

139

Folder mode is shown

SONG SEARCH ICON

RETURN ICONARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON MORE ICON

LIST ICON

05/09/16 14:35:44 31SNR600_142

Page 143: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Then select a song. If you choose Artist, select an artist,then select a song.

If you choose Album, select analbum, then select a song.

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

Search by Artist Search by Album

140

05/09/16 14:35:51 31SNR600_143

Page 144: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The player plays recorded MP3/WMA cards in recorded order.Maximum playable folder layers are8, total playable folders are 99, andtotal playable tracks are 999 per card.If your card has a complex structure,the player takes some time to readthe card before playing it.

Press the OPEN button. The screenfolds back, and the player appears.Press the eject button ( ), andremove the card, then press theCLOSE button.

You cannot close the display untilthe PC card is inserted all the way inor removed.

To take the system out of card mode,press the AM/FM button or CD/AUX button. You can also touch theFM1, FM2, AM, or CD icon on thescreen. To return to card mode,press the CD/AUX button or touchthe CARD icon.

Playing a PC Card (Vehicles with Navigation System)

Playing an MP3/WMA Card Removing a PC CardTo Stop Playing a Card

Features

141

EJECT BUTTON

CLOSE BUTTON

05/09/16 14:35:57 31SNR600_144

Page 145: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Player Error Messages (Vehicles with Navigation System)

142

05/09/16 14:36:03 31SNR600_145

Page 146: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Radio ReceptionF

eatures

143

05/09/16 14:36:11 31SNR600_146

Page 147: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio Reception

144

05/09/16 14:36:17 31SNR600_147

Page 148: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

145

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

05/09/16 14:36:27 31SNR600_148

Page 149: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code(models without navigation system)/four-digit code (models withnavigation system) in the presetbuttons. Because there are hundredsof number combinations possiblefrom five or four-digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. Use thepreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (models without navigationsystem)/four-digit code (modelswith navigation system). The code ison the radio code card included inyour owner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit (models without navigationsystem)/four-digit (models withnavigation system) sequence, thenenter the correct code. You have 10tries to enter the correct code. If youare unsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

Radio Theft Protection

146

05/09/16 14:36:32 31SNR600_149

Page 150: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

▲ ▼

+ -

+-

+ -

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, adisc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card(if a card is loaded).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation. If you press and hold the CHbutton ( ) or ( ) until you hear abeep, the system goes into the seekmode. It finds a station with a strongsignal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previous

track. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display. If you pressand hold the CH button ( ) or ( )until you hear a beep, you can selecta different folder.

To use the voice control system,refer to the navigation systemmanual.

If equipped

On models with navigation system

Remote Audio ControlsF

eatures

147

CH BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

05/09/16 14:36:39 31SNR600_150

Page 151: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the trunk, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights (low beam), parkinglights, side marker lights, andtaillights flash if someone attemptsto break into your vehicle or removethe radio. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then it stops. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,driver’s lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and trunk openindicators on the instrument panel(see page ) to see if the doors andtrunk are fully closed. Since it is notpart of the monitor display, manuallycheck the hood.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

60

Security System

148

NOTE:

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

05/09/16 14:36:46 31SNR600_151

Page 152: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel comes onto show the system is nowactivated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 40 km/h (25 mph)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control

Using the Cruise Control

Features

149

CANCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

05/09/16 14:36:55 31SNR600_152

Page 153: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the DECEL/SET button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph).

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1.6 km/h (1 mph).

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed

150

05/09/16 14:37:02 31SNR600_153

Page 154: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 40 km/h (25 mph) then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle will accelerateto the same cruising speed as before.

Cruise Control

Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Features

151

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

05/09/16 14:37:09 31SNR600_154

Page 155: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

152

05/09/16 14:37:11 31SNR600_155

Page 156: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 154.................Fuel Recommendation . 154

.........Service Station Procedures . 155....................................Refueling . 155

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 156

...................................Oil Check . 157.............Engine Coolant Check . 158

...............................Fuel Economy . 158...Accessories and Modifications . 159

.............................Carrying Cargo . 161

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

153

05/09/16 14:37:14 31SNR600_156

Page 157: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

We recommended using a qualitygasoline containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline that

does NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 1,000 km (600 miles).

Avoid hard braking for the first300 km (200 miles).

On vehicles with manual transmission

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

154

05/09/16 14:37:26 31SNR600_157

Page 158: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Consult your dealer.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

To open the fuel fill door, pushdown the lever on the left of thedriver’s seat.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedures

Refuelling

Before

Driving

155

Push

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

05/09/16 14:37:35 31SNR600_158

Page 159: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. Thehood will pop up slightly.

Holding the grip (the rod can behot if the engine has beenrunning), pull the support rod outof its clip. Insert the end into thedesignated hole in the hood.

2.

1.

3.

5.

6.

238

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

156

HOODRELEASEHANDLE

LATCH

05/09/16 14:37:43 31SNR600_159

Page 160: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout 30 cm (a foot) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

2.

3.

1.

4.

199

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Before

Driving

157

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

SUPPORT ROD

CLIP

GRIP

05/09/16 14:37:53 31SNR600_160

Page 161: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages displayed in theinformation display. See

(see page).

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page .

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

194

202

194

For example,

Improving Fuel EconomyEngine Coolant Check

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy

158

RESERVE TANK

MIN

MAX

05/09/16 14:38:03 31SNR600_161

Page 162: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

240Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

159

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

05/09/16 14:38:11 31SNR600_162

Page 163: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling,stability, and reliability.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

Non-Acura wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

160

05/09/16 14:38:18 31SNR600_163

Page 164: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Console compartmentTrunk

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Center pocket

Door pockets

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

161

GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKETTRUNK

DOOR POCKETS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

05/09/16 14:38:25 31SNR600_164

Page 165: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

- ×Steps for determining correct loadlimit:

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedin the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all passengers, accessories,and cargo must not exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) orthe Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). Both are on a label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 395 kg. This figure includes thetotal weight of all occupants, cargo,and accessories, and the tongue loadif you are towing a trailer.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 395kg’’ on your vehicle’s placard.(The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.)

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from395 kg.

For example, if the maximum loadis 395 kg and there will be five 70kg passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 45 kg.

(395 350 (5 70) = 45 kg.)

4.

5.

3.

1.

2.6.

180

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

162

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

05/09/16 14:38:34 31SNR600_165

Page 166: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals or the seat.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

53

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Before

Driving

163

05/09/16 14:38:41 31SNR600_166

Page 167: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

164

05/09/16 14:38:43 31SNR600_167

Page 168: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, and facts youneed if you are planning to tow atrailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 166.......................Starting the Engine . 167

...................Manual Transmission . 168..............Automatic Transmission . 170

...........................................Parking . 177.............................Braking System . 178

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 179...........................Towing a Trailer . 180

DrivingD

riving

165

05/09/16 14:38:46 31SNR600_168

Page 169: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4. 9.

8.

7.

6.

5. 10.

16

217

86

94

71

57

Preparing to Drive

166

05/09/16 14:38:56 31SNR600_169

Page 170: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

5.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

74

Starting the EngineD

riving

167

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 2,400 meters(8,000 f eet) adds to this problem.

05/09/16 14:39:05 31SNR600_170

Page 171: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse. When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause your clutch to wearout faster.

Manual Transmission

168

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

05/09/16 14:39:10 31SNR600_171

Page 172: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Normal acceleration

24 km/h (15 mph)41 km/h (26 mph)64 km/h (40 mph)85 km/h (53 mph)

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Manual TransmissionD

riving

169

05/09/16 14:39:15 31SNR600_172

Page 173: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

In the sequential sportshift mode,the ‘‘M’’ indicator next to the ‘‘S’’indicator comes on, and theilluminated number next to theposition indicators shows you thegear you have selected.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators

170

M INDICATOR

05/09/16 14:39:20 31SNR600_173

Page 174: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and pressthe release button on the front of theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

176

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to SS to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

Automatic Transmission

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Shifting

Driving

171

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASEBUTTON

05/09/16 14:39:27 31SNR600_174

Page 175: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

-Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to reverse. To shiftfrom reverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

To shift to Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever.

With the shift lever in ‘‘S’’ position,you can select the sequentialsportshift mode to shift gears muchlike a manual transmission, butwithout a clutch pedal.

To enter the sequential sportshiftmode, move the shift lever to the Sposition by pressing the releasebutton on the front of the shift lever,then press either of the paddleshifters. To return to ‘‘D,’’ move theshift lever to the D position.

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and press eitherof the paddle shifters, the displayshows the selected gear and the ‘‘M’’indicator comes on.

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

S (S position)

Automatic Transmission

172

SELECTED GEAR

05/09/16 14:39:34 31SNR600_175

Page 176: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

+ -

+- →

--

--

--

--

With the shift lever in the S position,you can shift up or down by usingthe (right side) or (left side)paddle shifters on each side of thesteering wheel.

Each time you press the right side( ), the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Press the left side ( )to downshift. The number of thegear selected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission starts in firstgear. You have to manually upshiftbetween first and fifth gears. Makesure you upshift before the enginespeed reaches the tachometer’s redzone.The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under theseconditions:

To shift from

4 3

5 4

To shift from

4 3

5 4

Driving uphill

To shift from

4 3

5 4Speed range

under 32 km/h(20 mph)

under 52 km/h(33 mph)

Speed range

32 50 km/h(20 31 mph)

52 70 km/h(33 44 mph)

Speed range

32 52 km/h(20 33 mph)

52 72 km/h(33 45 mph)

Driving on level roads

Driving downhill

Automatic Transmission

Drivin

g

173

PADDLE SHIFTER

05/10/06 10:31:37 31SNR600 0176 

Page 177: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed is under13 km/h (8 mph).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission does not downshift.The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmissiondownshifts, and the display showsthe selected lower gear.

To shift from

2 1

3 2

4 3

Speed range

over 0 km/h(0 mph)

over 10 km/h(6 mph)

over 32 km/h(20 mph)

over 52 km/h(33 mph)

Speed range

under 50 km/h(31 mph)

under 100 km/h(62 mph)

under 145 km/h(91 mph)

Automatic Transmission

174

05/09/16 14:39:52 31SNR600_177

Page 178: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When you are in sequentialsportshift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, press the right side ( )paddle shifter to shift to second gear.You will see ‘‘2’’ in the display.Starting out in second gear will helpto reduce wheelspin in deep snow oron a slippery surface.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Automatic Transmission

Starting in Second Gear Engine Speed Limiter

Driving

175

05/09/16 14:39:56 31SNR600_178

Page 179: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pressing the release button doesnot shift the transmission out ofPark:

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Insert a key into the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the lever outof Park to neutral.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the shift lever side.Return the key to the ignitionswitch, press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic Transmission

176

COVER

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCKRELEASE SLOTNOTCH

05/09/16 14:40:06 31SNR600_179

Page 180: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is on anincline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Parking Tips

ParkingD

riving

177

Never install a sunshade between theupper and lower meters on theinstrument panel. If you do, you couldcause heat damage to the upper meteron a very hot day.

05/09/16 14:40:15 31SNR600_180

Page 181: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes. A power assist helps reducethe effort needed on the brake pedal.The ABS helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

178

05/09/16 14:40:22 31SNR600_181

Page 182: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

239

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle;

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

179

05/09/16 14:40:30 31SNR600_182

Page 183: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10 % of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 450 kg (1,000 lbs).Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

Load Limits

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a Trailer

180

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

05/09/16 14:40:37 31SNR600_183

Page 184: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 % of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40 % toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle axles is:

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the rear axle

(TOURING)

(TURING)

(PREMIUM)

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

(PREMIUM)

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:on the front axle

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Checking Loads

Towing a TrailerD

riving

181

1,730 kg (3,814 lbs)

1,760 kg (3,880 lbs)

925 kg (2,039 lbs)

955 kg (2,105 lbs)

815 kg (1,797 lbs)

815 kg (1,797 lbs)

965 kg (2,127 lbs)

930 kg (2,050 lbs)

810 kg (1,786 lbs)

810 kg (1,786 lbs)

1,780 kg (3,924 lbs)

1,750 kg (3,858 lbs)

05/09/16 14:40:48 31SNR600_184

Page 185: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow. If you choose electric brakes, be

sure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Acura recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 450 kg(1,000 lbs) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Trailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

182

05/09/16 14:40:57 31SNR600_185

Page 186: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, and localregulations. Check with your localrecreational vehicle dealer for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Many Canadian provinces and U.S.states require special outside mirrorswhen towing a trailer. Even if theydon’t, you should install specialmirrors if you cannot clearly seebehind you, or if the trailer creates ablind spot.

Additional Towing EquipmentTrailer Lights

Towing a TrailerD

riving

183

05/09/16 14:41:02 31SNR600_186

Page 187: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare aretrailer maker.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

180 181

218

bottom

Pre-Tow Checklist

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a Trailer

184

05/09/16 14:41:12 31SNR600_187

Page 188: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

--

--

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer. (See ‘‘

’’ in the next column foradditional gear information.)

When driving uphill and downhill,use the sequential sportshift mode toprovide the proper engine power andengine braking on each gear. Selectfourth, third, second, or first gearwith the paddle shifter; depending onthe vehicle speeds and roadcondition. Do not use fifth gear. Therecommended speed range for eachgear position is shown in the table.

Gear position

1

2

3

Speed range

0 60 km/h(0 37 mph)

40 106 km/h(25 66 mph)

80 167 km/h(50 104 mph)

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving onHills

Driving

185

05/09/16 14:41:19 31SNR600_188

Page 189: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

186

05/09/16 14:41:24 31SNR600_189

Page 190: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, amaintenance record, and instructionsfor simple maintenance tasks youmay want to take care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 188....................Maintenance Minder . 189....................Maintenance Record . 196

..............................Fluid Locations . 198........................Adding Engine Oil . 199

Changing the Engine Oil....................................and Filter . 200

..............................Engine Coolant . 202....................Windshield Washers . 203

.......................Transmission Fluid . 204..........Automatic Transmission . 204

..............Manual Transmission . 205................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 206

.............................................Lights . 207................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 214

.....................................Floor Mats . 214..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 214

.................................Wiper Blades . 215...............................................Tires . 217

...................Checking the Battery . 223.............................Vehicle Storage . 224

MaintenanceM

aintenance

187

05/09/16 14:41:28 31SNR600_190

Page 191: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or qualifiedmechanic.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

188

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

05/09/16 14:41:38 31SNR600_191

Page 192: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

------------

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until theengine oil life display appears (seepage ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the engine oil lifedisplay according to this table:

63

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

189

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

SEL/RESET BUTTON

05/09/16 14:41:45 31SNR600_192

Page 193: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15percent or less, you will see theengine oil life indicator every timeyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. The maintenanceminder indicator will also come on,and the maintenance item code(s)for other scheduled maintenanceitems needing service will bedisplayed next to the engine oil lifeindicator.

195

Maintenance Minder

190

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

05/09/16 14:41:51 31SNR600_193

Page 194: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed byyour dealer as soon as possible.

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will seenegative mileage. It is displayedwhen you drive more than 10 kmafter seeing the 0 percent message.Afterward, it shows your drivingdistance if you continue to drive.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the SEL/RESET button.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicatorremains on even if you change theinformation display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on the nextpage.

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

191

05/09/16 14:41:56 31SNR600_194

Page 195: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

Press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

All maintenance items displayed inthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Press the SEL/RESET button forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

1.

2.

3.

195

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

192

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEM

05/09/16 14:42:05 31SNR600_195

Page 196: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.

We recommend using Acura partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Press the SEL/RESET button formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

4.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

193

05/09/16 14:42:12 31SNR600_196

Page 197: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

157

158

206

219

204

207

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

194

05/09/16 14:42:19 31SNR600_197

Page 198: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Maintenance Minder

195

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months afterthe display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluidevery 3 years.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.Inspect idle speed every 256,000 km (160,000 miles).

NOTE:

1 :

194

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every24,000 km (15,000 miles).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluidDriving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in higher transmissionand transfer temperatures.This requires transmission and transfer fluid changesmore frequently than recommended by theMaintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicleunder these conditions, have the transmission andtransfer fluid changed at 100,000 km (60,000 miles),then every 48,000 km (30,000 miles). (For A/T only:)Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

05/09/16 14:42:27 31SNR600_198

Page 199: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Maintenance Record

196

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Acura service history booklet.

05/09/16 14:42:32 31SNR600_199

Page 200: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

197

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

05/09/16 14:42:37 31SNR600_200

Page 201: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Fluid Locations

198

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop) ENGINE OIL

FILL CAP

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

05/09/16 14:42:41 31SNR600_201

Page 202: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Reinstall the engineoil fill cap, and tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes, and recheck theoil level on the engine oil dipstick.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

199

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

05/09/16 14:42:47 31SNR600_202

Page 203: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

200

DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

05/09/16 14:42:55 31SNR600_203

Page 204: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

Changing the Engine Oil and FilterM

aintenance

201

OIL FILTER

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m , 29 lbf·ft)

4.2 (4.4 US qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

05/09/16 14:43:05 31SNR600_204

Page 205: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

202

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

05/09/16 14:43:10 31SNR600_205

Page 206: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

The low washer level indicator willcome on when the level is low.Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

6.

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield WashersM

aintenance

203

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

05/09/16 14:43:22 31SNR600_206

Page 207: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 byyour dealer as soon as it isconvenient.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission

204

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

05/09/16 14:43:31 31SNR600_207

Page 208: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

Insert the dipstick all the way backin the transmission.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

6.

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission

Maintenance

205

FILLER BOLT

Correct Level

05/09/16 14:43:37 31SNR600_208

Page 209: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Manual Transmission only

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoir monthly.Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake Fluid Clutch Fluid

206

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

05/09/16 14:43:46 31SNR600_209

Page 210: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

To change the headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its holder.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be performed by your dealeror other qualified mechanic.

1.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb High Beam Headlight

LightsM

aintenance

207

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

05/09/16 14:43:53 31SNR600_210

Page 211: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you replaced a headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, reinstall theengine coolant reserve tank.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the socket by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Insert the socket into the hole, andturn it one-quarter turn clockwiseto lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the new socket. Make sure itis on all the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew socket.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

The following page explains how toreplace a low beam headlight bulb onTouring model.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

On Premium modelLow Beam Headlight

Lights

208

TABSOCKET

05/09/16 14:44:01 31SNR600_211

Page 212: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Insert the new socket into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the new socket. Make sure itis on all the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew socket.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the socket by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, and turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

4.

1.

2.

LightsM

aintenance

209

TAB

SOCKETHOLDING CLIP

05/09/16 14:44:10 31SNR600_212

Page 213: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, and turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its socket.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

2.1.

Lights

Replacing the Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

210

HOLDING CLIP

05/09/16 14:44:19 31SNR600_213

Page 214: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Open the trunk.

Remove the screw from the centerof each fastener on the side of thetrunk lining. Pull the lining back.

The front turn signal and the frontparking light bulbs are in the highbeam headlight assembly. To changea bulb on the driver’s side, removethe engine coolant reserve tank (seepage ).

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove the turn signal bulb,push it in slightly and turn it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. Toremove the front parking lightbulb, pull it straight out of itssocket.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,turn signal, or rear side marker.

1.5.

2.1.

2.

3.

4.

207

Replacing Rear Bulbs(In Fenders)

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Front Parking Light Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

211

FASTENER

FASTENER

05/09/16 14:44:30 31SNR600_214

Page 215: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Open the trunk.Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Remove the screw from the centerof each fastener on the trunk lidtrim. Pull the trim back.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Put the fasteners into the holes onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screws.

1.

2.4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

212

BULBS

SOCKETS FASTENERS

SOCKET

05/09/16 14:44:39 31SNR600_215

Page 216: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Open the trunk, and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks. Make surethe new bulb is working.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

Put the fasteners into the holes onthe trunk lid trim. Reinstall thescrews.

Determine which bulb is burnedout: parking light or back-up light.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise. 2.

1.

3.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

213

BULB

SOCKETSOCKET

SOCKET

BULBS

05/09/16 14:44:49 31SNR600_216

Page 217: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps them fromsliding forward and possiblyinterfering with vehicle operation.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use non-Acura floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 24,000 km (15,000miles) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

Floor Mats

Dust and Pollen Filter

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

214

LOOP

05/09/16 14:44:59 31SNR600_217

Page 218: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

To replace a wiper blade:

Lift the wiper arm off thewindshield, raising the driver’sside first, then the passenger’sside.

Remove the cover by carefullyprying the edge of the cover usinga flat-tipped screwdriver andsliding it sideways.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

215

COVER

WIPER ARMS

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

05/09/16 14:45:06 31SNR600_218

Page 219: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Remove the blade from the bladeassembly:

Find the side of the bladelabeled ‘‘LOCK.’’ This is the sideyou pull out.Pull back the end of the bladeassembly on the ‘‘LOCK’’ side ofthe blade. Then grab the end ofthe blade, and slide it out.

3. 4. 5.

Wiper Blades

216

BLADE ASSEMBLY

TAB

WIPER BLADE

REINFORCEMENTSTRIP

05/09/16 14:45:14 31SNR600_219

Page 220: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Install the new blade onto theblade assembly:

Pull back either end of the bladeassembly.Place the side of the blade notlabeled ‘‘LOCK’’ on the end ofthe blade assembly, and slidethe blade onto the assemblyuntil it is fully installed.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Reinstall the cover onto the bladeassembly.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled and that its edge is notbunched up.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades, Tires

Tires Inflation Guidelines

Maintenance

217

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

05/09/16 14:45:26 31SNR600_220

Page 221: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 10 to 20 kPa (0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm , 1 to 2 psi) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1mile). Add or release air, if needed,to match the recommended cold tirepressures.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 30 to 40kPa (0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm , 4 to 6 psi)higher than the cold readings. Thisis normal. Do not let air out to matchthe recommended cold air pressure.The tire will be underinflated.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressuresare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

154

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tires

218

420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi)

P205/55R16 89H220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm ,

32 psi)

Front/Rear:

05/09/16 14:45:36 31SNR600_221

Page 222: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread lefton the tire.

Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance

TiresM

aintenance

219

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Acura wheels weights f orbalancing.

05/09/16 14:45:45 31SNR600_222

Page 223: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated. Ifyou purchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

220

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

05/09/16 14:45:51 31SNR600_223

Page 224: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

+Wheels: Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Tires:

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

See page for tire size information.252

CONTINUED

Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving

Tires

Snow Tires

Maintenance

221

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P205/55R16 89H

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

05/09/16 14:46:00 31SNR600_224

Page 225: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners, on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

Tires

Tire Chains

222

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

05/09/16 14:46:04 31SNR600_225

Page 226: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the BatteryM

aintenance

223

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

05/09/16 14:46:10 31SNR600_226

Page 227: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Vehicle Storage

224

05/09/16 14:46:19 31SNR600_227

Page 228: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 226....................Changing a Flat Tire . 227

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 231................................Jump Starting . 233

..............If the Engine Overheats . 234.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 237..........Charging System Indicator . 237

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 238...............Brake System Indicator . 239

..............................................Fuses . 240..............................Fuse Locations . 243

......................Emergency Towing . 245

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

225

05/09/16 14:46:23 31SNR600_228

Page 229: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not mount tire chains on thecompact spare tire.

Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).

Compact Spare Tire

226

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi)

05/09/16 14:46:31 31SNR600_229

Page 230: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

227

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

JACK TOOL CASE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

05/09/16 14:46:39 31SNR600_230

Page 231: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

6. 7. 8.

9.

Changing a Flat Tire

228

JACKING POINTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

05/09/16 14:46:46 31SNR600_231

Page 232: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

10.

11.

12.

13.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

229

BRAKE HUB

108 N·m (11 kgf·m , 80 lbf·ft)

05/09/16 14:46:53 31SNR600_232

Page 233: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack and tools in the toolcase. Place the tool case in thecenter of the flat tire.

Store the center cap in the trunk.

Lower the trunk floor, and closethe trunk lid.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

Changing a Flat Tire

230

SPACERCONE

For sparetire

For normaltire

WINGBOLT

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

05/09/16 14:47:01 31SNR600_233

Page 234: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound or series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Check these things:

233

245

223

233

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

231

05/09/16 14:47:09 31SNR600_234

Page 235: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

74

167

240

245

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Won’t Start

232

05/09/16 14:47:15 31SNR600_235

Page 236: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

To jump start your vehicle:

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C (ifequipped), audio system (ifequipped), lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (M/T) orPark (A/T), and set the parkingbrake.

1.

2.3.

CONTINUED

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

233

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

05/09/16 14:47:23 31SNR600_236

3

4

2

1

creo
Page 237: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The reading of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

7.

6.

4.

5.

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

If the Engine Overheats

234

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

05/09/16 14:47:32 31SNR600_237

Page 238: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If the temperature gauge readingstays at the red mark, turn off theengine.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake. Turn off all theaccessories, and turn on thehazard indicator.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge reading comes down to themidpoint, then continue driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

245

CONTINUED

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

235

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

05/09/16 14:47:39 31SNR600_238

Page 239: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

8.

9.

10.

11.

7.

245Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

236

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

05/09/16 14:47:44 31SNR600_239

Page 240: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

157

199

245

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

237

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

05/09/16 14:47:53 31SNR600_240

Page 241: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some provinces, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes are erased. It takes atleast three days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refuelled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once (seepage ). Tightening the cap willnot turn the indicator offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a provincialemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation ( see page ).

155

256

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes

ProvincialEmissions Testing

238

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

05/09/16 14:48:00 31SNR600_241

Page 242: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

The brake system indicatornormally comes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. It will stayon if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

206

245Emergency

Towing

Brake System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

239

05/09/16 14:48:06 31SNR600_242

Page 243: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side, next to the brake fluidreservoir. To open it, push the tabsas shown.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

The fuses are in two fuse boxes. Theinterior fuse box is underneath thesteering column.

243 244

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

240

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB

FUSE LABEL

05/09/16 14:48:13 31SNR600_243

Page 244: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Remove the screw with aPhillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

1.

2.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

241

FUSE PULLER

BLOWNFUSE BLOWN

05/09/16 14:48:20 31SNR600_244

Page 245: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.Look for a blown wire inside the

fuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower. The spare fusesare provided back of the under-hood fuse cover.

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Toreset the AUTO function, see page

.

6.

5.91

Fuses

242

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

05/09/16 14:48:26 31SNR600_245

Page 246: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

--

CONTINUED

No. Amps.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

4

567

891011121314151617181920212223

50 A40 A

20 A20 A30 A30 A40 A10 A15 A15 A

7.5 A

15 A15 A7.5 A15 A7.5 A10 A

1

2

3

100 A70 A80 A50 A30 A30 A

Main FuseEPSOption MainIgnition Switch MainABS motorABS FSR

Headlight MainPower Window MainNot UsedSub Fan MotorMain Fan Motor (M/T)Main Fan Motor (A/T)Rear DefoggerBlowerHazardFI SubStop and HornNot UsedNot UsedIGPS Oil LevelNot UsedNot UsedIG CoilFI MainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

243

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

05/09/16 14:48:33 31SNR600_246

Page 247: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

---

--

No. No.

No.

Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected Amps.

Amps. Circuits Protected

:

12345678

910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132333435363738

7.5 A15 A10 A7.5 A

(15 A)

IG1 ODSMETERSRSRight Headlight HighLeft Headlight HighSmall (Interior)Small (Exterior)Right Headlight Low

IG1 Power WindowFuel PumpAlternatorABS UnitHeated SeatNot UsedNot UsedNot Used

7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A10 A7.5 A7.5 A

10/15 A

10/15 A20 A15 A

20/30 A

(20 A)20 A20 A

15 A15 A20 A

20 A20 A

7.5 A10 A7.5 A30 A

Left Headlight LowHeadlight High MainSmall (Main)Not UsedHeadlight Low MainNot UsedNot UsedMoonroofDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear ACC Socket

B ACCPassenger’s Power WindowNot UsedRight Rear Power WindowLeft Rear Power WindowNot UsedACC RadioIG2 HACDaytime Running LightWiper

Premium model

Fuse Locations

244

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

05/09/16 14:48:41 31SNR600_247

Page 248: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 80 km (50 miles), and keep thespeed below 55 km/h (35 mph).

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

CONTINUED

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way to trans-port your vehicle.

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Emergency TowingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

245

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

05/09/16 14:48:52 31SNR600_248

Page 249: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Emergency Towing

246

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

05/09/16 14:48:56 31SNR600_249

Page 250: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

................Identification Numbers . 248................................Specifications . 250.................................Tire Labeling . 252

.......................Emissions Controls . 253.....................The Clean Air Act . 253

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 253

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 253

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 253

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 254....................PGM-FI System . 254

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 254

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 254

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 254

....................Replacement Parts . 254..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 255

......Provincial Emissions Testing . 256

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

247

05/09/16 14:49:00 31SNR600_250

Page 251: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

The VIN is also located on theengine bulkhead. Slide the cover onthe engine compartment bulkhead toview the VIN. Always close the coverwhen finished.

Identif ication Numbers

248

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

COVER

05/09/16 14:49:04 31SNR600_251

Page 252: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

249

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

05/09/16 14:49:08 31SNR600_252

Page 253: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Specifications

250

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Capacities

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Water cooled 4-stroke, SOHCVTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

86 x 86 mm (3.39 x 3.39 in)

9.6NGK:DENSO:

IFR7G-11KSSK22PR-M11S

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

ManualtransmissionfluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshield washer reservoir

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

4,544 mm (178.9 in)1,755 mm (69.1 in)1,435 mm (56.5 in)2,700 mm (106.3 in)1,499 mm (59.0 in)1,528 mm (60.2 in)

1,999 cm (122 cu-in)

50 (13.2 US gal)

4.3 (1.14 US gal)4.2 (1.11 US gal)

6.6 (1.74 US gal)6.5 (1.72 US gal)

4.2 (4.4 US qt)4.0 (4.2 US qt)5.3 (5.6 US qt)1.5 (1.6 US qt)1.7 (1.8 US qt)

2.4 (2.5 US qt)5.9 (6.2 US qt)

0.4 (0.11 US gal)

4.5 (4.8 US qt)

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

Change

Without filterTotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

1

2

Including filter

05/09/16 14:49:24 31SNR600_253

Page 254: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

- -

--

---------------

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

251

Air Conditioning Fuses

Alignment

Tires

Battery

Lights

HFC-134a (R-134a)

SP-10

12 V 60 W (HB3)

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant oil type

12 V 21 W12 V 51 W (HB4)

Interior

Under-hood

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0°1°30’7°

P205/55R16 89HT125/70D15 95M

Size

Pressure

400 450 g (14.1 15.9 oz)

0.0 mm (0.00 in)2.0 mm (0.08 in)

220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm , 32 psi)420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi)

See page 244 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard column.See page 243 or the fuse boxcover.

Capacity12 V12 V

47 AH/20 HR38 AH/5 HR

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

5 W8 W8 W5 W21 W3 CP21 CP3 CP21/5 W21 W

12 V12 V

Headlights

Front turn signal lightsFront side marker lightsFront Parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsRear side marker lightsBack-up lightsTaillightsHigh-mount brake lightLicense plate lightsCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk light

2 CP3 CP

HighLow Front

RearFrontRearFront

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

05/09/16 14:49:46 31SNR600_254

Page 255: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

--

--

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer’sidentification mark.Tire type code.Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).Tire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).Rim diameter in inches.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like this example:

P

55

R

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X2202

Max Press

Max Load

205

89

H

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire LoadTire Size

252

DOT B97R FW6X 2202P205/55R16 89H

05/09/16 14:50:02 31SNR600_255

Page 256: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The onboard refuelling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refuelling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

253

05/09/16 14:50:10 31SNR600_256

Page 257: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

Emissions Controls

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

254

05/09/16 14:50:20 31SNR600_257

Page 258: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

255

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

05/09/16 14:50:27 31SNR600_258

Page 259: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 5° and35°C (40° and 95°F).

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Stop the vehicle, turn off theignition switch, and leave it off for30 minutes.

Select a nearby lightly travelledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 80 to 97 km/h(50 to 60 mph) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use

the cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Testing of Readiness Codes

Provincial Emissions Testing

256

05/09/16 14:50:35 31SNR600_259

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

2006_CSX.p258.pdf 9/23/05 6:38:13 AM2006_CSX.p258.pdf 9/23/05 6:38:13 AM

Page 260: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

....Customer Service Information . 258....................Warranty Coverages . 259

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

257

05/09/16 14:50:38 31SNR600_260

Page 261: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your AcuraCustomer Relations.

248

Customer Service Information

258

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

05/09/16 14:50:43 31SNR600_261

Page 262: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Please refer to the 2006 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty CoveragesW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

259

05/09/16 14:50:46 31SNR600_262

Page 263: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 159ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 75...............Accessory Power Socket . 98

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 200.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 23

...Airbags, Additional Information . 23

...Additional Safety Precautions . 34..........Advanced Airbag System . 28

.............................Airbag Service . 33How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 32How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 32..How the SRS Indicator Works . 31

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 31........................SRS Components . 23

..............Air Conditioning System . 100.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 218

......................................Antifreeze . 202

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 59, 179

...................................Operation . 179..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 146

Anti-theft Steering Column..........................................Lock . 75

............................................Armrest . 88................................Audio System . 106

.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 77.........................Auto Door Locking . 77

.....................Auto Door Unlocking . 79...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 21

.............Automatic Speed Control . 149..............Automatic Transmission . 170

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 250...............Checking Fluid Level . 204

.......................................Shifting . 170Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 170................Shift Lever Positions . 171

....................Shift Lock Release . 176

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 237............................Jump Starting . 233

..............................Maintenance . 223............................Specifications . 251

..............................Before Driving . 153..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 20

...........................Beverage Holders . 98Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 179.............Break-in, New Linings . 154

....................Bulb Replacement . 211...........................................Fluid . 206

.................Pad Wear Indicators . 178.......................................Parking . 177

.................System Indicator . 58, 239.............................Braking System . 178

.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 154..Brightness Control, Instruments . 70

........................Brights, Headlights . 69

Index

A B

IND

EX

I

05/09/16 14:50:51 31SNR600_263

Page 264: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 212

..............................Brake Lights . 211........Front Side Marker Lights . 210.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 211

.................................Headlights . 207.........High-mount Brake Light . 213

..........................Parking Lights . 211.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 211..........Rear Turn Signal Lights . 211

............................Specifications . 251..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 207

.........................................Card, PC . 132............................Capacities Chart . 250

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53.............................Carrying Cargo . 161

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii...................................CD Changer . 118

.......................................CD Player . 111....................................Ceiling Light . 96

........................Certification Label . 248............................................Chains . 222

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 227

Changing Oil........................................How to . 200......................................When to . 189

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 237..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65............Checklist, Before Driving . 166

.....................................Child Safety . 35Child Seats

.............LATCH Anchor System . 44...........................Lower Anchors . 44

................Tether Anchor Points . 47..................Childproof Door Locks . 77

.........................Clock, Setting the . 123...................................Clutch Fluid . 206

........................CO in the Exhaust . 254............Cold Weather, Starting in . 167

..............................Compact Spare . 226...................Console Compartment . 98.................Consumer Information . 258

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55Coolant

........................................Adding . 202....................................Checking . 158

.........................Proper Solution . 202...................Temperature Gauge . 64

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 253

............Cruise Control Operation . 149....Customer Service Information . 258

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 70........................Defog and Defrost . 103

................Defogger, Rear Window . 71

..............Defrosting the Windows . 103....................................Dimensions . 250

...............Dimming the Headlights . 69Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 204..................................Engine Oil . 157

..........................Directional Signals . 69Disc Brake Pad Wear

...................................Indicators . 178.....................................Disc Player . 111

..................Display Change Button . 63.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 201

Index

C

D

II

05/09/16 14:50:56 31SNR600_264

Page 265: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

Doors.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 77

.....................Auto Door Locking . 77.................Auto Door Unlocking . 79

..............Locking and Unlocking . 76......................Power Door Locks . 76

Downshifting, Manual.............................Transmission . 168

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 165

....................................Economy . 158..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 214

...................................Fan, Interior . 100...........................................Features . 99

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 155

Filters.........................Dust and Pollen . 214

...............................................Oil . 2005-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 205................................Shifting the . 168

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 70...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 227

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 204

..........................................Brake . 206.........................................Clutch . 206

...................................Locations . 198..............Manual Transmission . 205

..................Windshield Washer . 203FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 143...........................Folding Rear Seat . 88..........................Four-way Flashers . 70

............................Front Airbags . 11, 26

..............................Economy, Fuel . 158............Emergencies on the Road . 225.............Battery, Jump Starting . 233...........Brake System Indicator . 239

................Changing a Flat Tire . 227.....Charging System Indicator . 237

..................Checking the Fuses . 240.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 237...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 238

..................Overheated Engine . 234...........................Emergency Brake . 95

......................Emergency Flashers . 70......................Emergency Towing . 245

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 82.......................Emissions Controls . 253........................Emissions Testing . 256

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 64

......Engine Speed Limiter . 169, 175Malfunction Indicator

......................................Lamp . 238........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 237..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 199

...............................Overheating . 234............................Specifications . 250

.......................................Starting . 167......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 154

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 253...............................Exhaust Fumes . 53

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 18

Index

F

E

IND

EX

III

05/09/16 14:51:01 31SNR600_265

Page 266: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

.................................................Fuel . 154......................Fill Door and Cap . 155

...........................................Gauge . 64................Octane Requirement . 154

...............................Oxygenated . 154........................Reserve Indicator . 61

........................Tank, Filling the . 155.....................Fuses, Checking the . 240

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 158..........................................Gasohol . 154.........................................Gasoline . 154

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 61...........................................Gauge . 64

................Octane Requirement . 154........................Tank, Filling the . 155

................Gas Station Procedures . 155Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 64...............................................Fuel . 64

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 170

..............Manual Transmission . 168........................................Glove Box . 98

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 207..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 70

Headlights........................................Aiming . 207

............Daytime Running Lights . 70..................High Beam Indicator . 60

........................Reminder Beeper . 69........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 207

...................................Turning on . 69..............................Head Restraints . 87...............................Heated Mirrors . 95

.....................Heating and Cooling . 100.............High Altitude, Starting at . 167

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 69..............High-mount Brake Light . 213

.......................Hood, Opening the . 156..............................................Horn . 5, 67

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 248Ignition

..............................................Keys . 73...........................................Switch . 75

............Timing Control System . 254.........Important Safety Precautions . 8

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 58...............................Infant Restraint . 40

Infant Seats.............LATCH Anchor System . 44

...........................Lower Anchors . 44................Tether Anchor Points . 47

Inflation, Recommended Tire...................................Pressures . 218

........................Information Display . 63...................................Inside Mirror . 94

.............................Inspection, Tire . 219............................Instrument Panel . 57

................Instrument Panel Lights . 58........Instrument Panel Brightness . 70

.................................Interior Lights . 96........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 228.......................................Jack, Tire . 227

................................Jump Starting . 233

Index

H

I

G

J

IV

05/09/16 14:51:07 31SNR600_266

Page 267: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 73

.......................Label, Certification . 248.................Lane Change, Signaling . 69

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21.................LATCH Anchor System . 44

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 207

.......................................Indicator . 58.........................................Parking . 69

..................................Turn Signal . 69.....................................Load Limit . 162

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 75Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 75............................Fuel Fill Door . 155

.................................Power Door . 76...........................................Trunk . 82

........................Low Coolant Level . 158.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 61

................................Lower Anchors . 44...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 168

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 237...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 250

..................................Maintenance . 187........................................Minder . 189

.........................Minder Indicator . 61...Owner Maintenance Checks . 194

........................................Record . 196..........................................Safety . 188

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 238...................Manual Transmission . 168

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 205...............................Meters, Gauges . 63

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 154..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 94

.........................................Moonroof . 92....................................MP3/WMA . 112

...................Neutral Gear Position . 172..................New Vehicle Break-in . 154

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 248

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 154.........................................Odometer . 63

...............................Odometer, Trip . 64Oil

........................Change, How to . 200......................Change, When to . 189......................Checking Engine . 157..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 237

.......Selecting Proper Viscosity . 199...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 75

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 253

..............................Outside Mirrors . 94....Outside Temperature Indicator . 65

....................Overheating, Engine . 234.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 194

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 154

..............Panel Brightness Control . 70........................Park Gear Position . 171

Index

M

N

OK

L

P

IND

EX

V

05/09/16 14:51:14 31SNR600_267

Page 268: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

...........................................Parking . 177.................................Parking Brake . 95

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 58, 239

.................................Parking Lights . 69..Parking Over Things that Burn . 255

..................Playing the Radio . 108, 126........................Playing a Disc . 111, 129

.........................Playing a PC Card . 133.....................Playing CD Changer . 118

.............................PGM-FI System . 254.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

........................Protecting Children . 35.....................General Guidelines . 35

...........................Protecting Infants . 40...........Protecting Larger Children . 49

.............Protecting Small Children . 41......Provincial Emissions Testing . 256

...................Radiator Overheating . 234.............Radio/CD Sound System . 106

Radio/CD/PC Card Sound........................................System . 123

...................Readiness Codes . 238, 256Rear Lights, Bulb

.......................Replacement . 211-213..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 88

............................Rear View Mirror . 94.................Rear Window Defogger . 71...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 86

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 169.............................Reminder Lights . 58

................Remote Audio Controls . 147.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

Replacement Information..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 214

................Engine Oil and Filter . 200..........................................Fuses . 240

................................Light Bulbs . 207................Maintenance Minder . 189

...........................................Tires . 220.............................Wiper Blades . 215

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 22

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 158, 202

...............................Restraint, Child . 35

..................Reverse Gear Position . 172................................Rotation, Tire . 220

................................Safety Belts . 10, 20.................................Safety Features . 9

.........................................Airbags . 11.....................................Seat Belts . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 54...............................Safety Messages . ii

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 20...............Additional Information . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16, 21........................Maintenance . 22, 214

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 20, 58

...................System Components . 20...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16........................Seats, Adjusting the . 86

............................Security System . 148...............................Serial Number . 248

...........................Service Intervals . 189

Index

R

S

VI

05/09/16 14:51:19 31SNR600_268

Page 269: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

CONTINUED

.........Service Station Procedures . 155..........................Setting the Clock . 123

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 170........................Shift Lock Release . 176

..............................Side Airbags . 11, 29..........................Off Indicator . 32, 59

................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 31Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 210...............................Signaling Turns . 69

.....................................Snow Tires . 221................................Sound System . 106

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 226

............................Specifications . 251....................Specifications Charts . 250

................................Speed Control . 149Speed-sensitive Volume

.......Compensation (SVC) . 110, 128.........................................Spotlights . 96

..........SRS, Additional Information . 23...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

..........Advanced Airbag System . 28.............................Airbag Service . 33

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 32

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 32

How the SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 31

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 31........................SRS Components . 23

.............................SRS Indicator . 31, 59....START (Ignition Key Position) . 75

.......................Starting the Engine . 167In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 167................With a Dead Battery . 233

........Steam Coming from Engine . 234Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 71.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 75

...................Stereo Sound System . 106....................Storing Your Vehicle . 224

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 11, 23......................................Servicing . 33

.........................SRS Indicator . 31, 59

...................System Components . 23.........................................SVC . 110, 128

..................................Synthetic Oil . 200

Taillights, Changing..................................Bulbs . 211, 212

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 225Technical Descriptions

.....Emissions Control Systems . 253.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 154

..Provincial Emissions Testing . 256Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 255.................................Tire Labeling . 252

.......................Temperature Gauge . 64.....................Tether Anchor Points . 47

............................Theft Protection . 146..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 257

..........................Time, Setting the . 123....................................Tire Chains . 222

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 227

Index

T

IND

EX

VII

05/09/16 14:51:24 31SNR600_269

Page 270: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 54

....................Warranty Coverages . 259Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 203.......................................Indicator . 61.....................................Operation . 68

Wheel...............Adjusting the Steering . 71............Alignment and Balance . 219

..........................Compact Spare . 226...............................Nut Wrench . 228

Windows..................Operating the Power . 91

...........................Rear, Defogger . 71Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 68...................................Defroster . 103

.......................................Washers . 68Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 215.....................................Operation . 68

....................................Worn Tires . 219.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 245

...............................................Tires . 217..............................Air Pressure . 218

.........................Checking Wear . 219..........................Compact Spare . 226

......................................Inflation . 217..................................Inspection . 219

..............................Maintenance . 219...................................Replacing . 220

......................................Rotating . 220...........................................Snow . 221

............................Specifications . 251................................Tire Chains . 222

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 227Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 180..................Emergency Towing . 245

...........................Traction Devices . 222Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 204

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 205

..................Fluid Selection . 204, 205..............Identification Number . 248.............Shifting the Automatic . 170

..................Shifting the Manual . 168

.......................................Trip Meter . 64................................................Trunk . 82

........................................Opening . 82...................Open Monitor Light . 60

....................................Turn Signals . 69

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 225

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 154.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 201

..................................Vanity Mirror . 97.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 162

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 250....Vehicle Identification Number . 248

.............................Vehicle Storage . 224.....................................Ventilation . 102

.................................................VIN . 248..................................Viscosity, Oil . 199

Index

U

V

W

VIII

05/09/16 14:51:29 31SNR600_270

Page 271: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

XI

05/09/16 14:51:31 31SNR600_271

Page 272: 05/09/16 14:17:40 31SNR600 001 Owner’sIdentificationtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/NR0606/NR0606OMCE.pdf · The information and specifications included in this publication

Service Information Summary

Automatic Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Gasoline:

Recommended Engine Oil:Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Front/Rear:Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity (including differential):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

Spare Tire:

50 (13.2 US gal)

4.2 (4.4 US qt)

1.5 (1.6 US qt)

220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm , 32 psi)

420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi)

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).199

204

205

206

05/09/16 14:51:43 31SNR600_272